JP7404092B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game medium enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied, A pachinko machine that increases gaming interest through a so-called variable display game, in which multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not to give a predetermined gaming value is determined based on the display result. There are gaming machines. In such a pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game completely stops and the stopped symbol mode becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player occurs. In the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot is opened can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the big prize opening is opened earlier than the display switching timing of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2017-104625A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the grand prize opening increases if the game medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, This is still not sufficient from the viewpoint of displaying the information, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and lose interest in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine for playing games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, displaying an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of gaming value is performed at the start of the award amount display, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. It is possible to display
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration performance based on the start of the variable display,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.
In order to achieve the above purpose, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displaying the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displaying "0015" instead of displaying "0000");
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the CPU 120);
Special performances are executed according to the progress of the game (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.; in the examples, special performances are sometimes referred to as specific performances, but they are the same). A possible special effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part production pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the special performance (for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is configured to perform vibration between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. It is characterized by having different modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique has been proposed for gaming machines in which a vibrating means is provided in a ball firing handle, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-38019.

However, there was room for improvement in improving the interest of the performance using vibrations.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the game's interest when performing effects using vibrations.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another invention is a gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. , a predetermined vibration effect (for example, a vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. ) and a special vibration effect (such as driving the vibration motor 131 based on the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern), and a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the predetermined vibration performance (for example, A light emitting effect execution means (for example, using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance processing in step S172, etc.), and a specification that can execute specific performances (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), and when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. When the predetermined vibration performance is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation part performance pattern, etc.), and the light emission accompanying the predetermined vibration performance is higher than that when the predetermined vibration performance is executed. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the lighting mode of the effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (e.g., depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern and the purpose of the operation section effect pattern). jackpot reliability, etc.), the vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the predetermined vibration performance, The vibration mode is different from the special vibration performance (for example, the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature section 10SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of vibration performance and jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production and a line-of-sight guidance production, and a production period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, all the odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability state is changed. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a "small win," the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 to perform a performance (a process for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and indicates the content of the operation as appropriate). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of acquired balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, the game effect lamps 9 are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a production waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be terminated and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the states of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the termination judgment based on the count value of the number of special symbol fluctuations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot release preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", a predetermined timer initial value is Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start time performance is not on standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the number of times the jackpot opening opening counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variation" or "non-probable variation" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If the game is waiting for the next release at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. A grand prize opening time is set, which is the upper limit of the time for which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the gaming control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the gaming control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened (step 042 AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042 AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after opening the big winning hole. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission setting of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a big winning hole opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a big winning hole after opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), from the main board 11 side. A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 to . When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball that is present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set as 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before displaying the number of wins or the number of rounds, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1", and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the nR jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving players a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, and a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, and a count-up display (display notifying that the winning number is increasing) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the n+1st R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is added by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processing end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and this is the second round, until the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting performance is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. It should be noted that the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided at the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, simultaneously or with a time difference, such as in a downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period of time elapses, the right-handed display is continued as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time required for the counting switch 23 to detect the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after the game ball enters the grand prize slot as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), time elapses without winning, and as shown in Figure 10- 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1R are shown. A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. Thereafter, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win an additional prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after one round has started, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly identifies A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening has become completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to the completely open position, and the big winning opening door is in the completely open state. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, when the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a fanfare performance indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a grand prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the performance control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second round and onwards.

Furthermore, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance that follows, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as it is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the jackpot performance is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is displayed continuously from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has passed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may only be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the number of wins displayed, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of parts similar to those in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the specified command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined prize After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 042AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of displaying "0000") when the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the gaming value has been given, and then displays the value given as the specific display. Display according to the gaming value (for example, display "0015" after performing a count-up display to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there has been a winning and the number of wins has increased.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the command indicating that the variable prize winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, when the main board 11 Start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the big prize opening designation command sent from the side),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means is configured to lead the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state (for example, by opening the big prize opening door, the variable winning means causes the fired game ball to pass through the first path). and a second route that leads the game media to the ejection route by entering the second state (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the ejected game balls are a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) that is formed in the prize entry route and detects winning of the game media. etc.), including
The time from the path forming means to the detecting means for the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured to wait until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the big winning opening door). (e.g., the time is configured so that it is less than a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the grand prize opening, and to increase the enjoyment of the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform the operation (for example, after the jackpot has been won, the jackpot may be in an open state). Until this happens, as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3), by performing a right-handed effect, it is displayed to the player that he should play right-handed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely opened, In other words, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and in response to detecting that the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 is activated. (e.g. a command is sent from the side to specify when the big prize opening is open),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
Before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, when the operation promotion display is performed and the ejected game medium enters the variable winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specified Display a display (for example, before the start of the 1st round, a game ball fired by a right-handed performance is able to win a prize at the timing when the grand prize opening is open, and a prize can be won within the predetermined period) (If you do so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a certain period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched between them. (For example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is caught in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big prize door and the glass door frame 3a), as shown in FIG. 10-15. (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the state is still the same),
In the first round game when the control is again controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next jackpot is achieved, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the 1st round, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific display is the number of wins). display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big prize win). Until the mouth changes from the closed state to the open state, a fanfare effect indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered can be executed), and the fanfare effect is executed at the same time as the display of the award amount starts after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is possible to display a round game that allows you to identify the round game that is being played, and to perform an in-round performance that corresponds to the round game (for example, after the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins). (e.g., it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to round games),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 043AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). ),
A light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means determines whether the gaming medium has won a prize in the case where the gaming medium has entered the variable winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period and when the gaming medium has entered the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. Control the light emitting means with a light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the specific light emitting means emits light more often than the predetermined light emitting means per unit time (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042 AKS058 (step 042AKS064) in a manner that is greater than the number of times of illumination per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
The sound output means is
outputting a winning sound corresponding to winning when the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means;
The winning sound is output when the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, and when the game medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game medium enters the variable winning means into the grand prize opening). If a ball wins a prize, a winning sound is output regardless of whether the ball wins within a predetermined period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 044AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
It is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (for example, displaying the number of rounds),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display and the first round game are displayed. display the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the first round, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed),
When the second or subsequent round game among the plurality of round games is played, the second or subsequent round game occurs after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. Displaying the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the second round, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds is displayed),
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , The award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, within a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) If the game medium does not enter the grand prize slot, the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game will continue to be displayed, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), etc.)
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium enters the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , from the award amount displayed in the previous round game, the award amount corresponding to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, if the game media is sold within a predetermined period) If a prize is won in the corresponding big prize slot, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-30), the number of earned balls that was displayed in the previous round game will be changed to the number of earned balls awarded corresponding to the prize. (such as adding and displaying numbers),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display being displayed in response to winning of the game medium in the variable winning means,
The update display of the award amount display ends after the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and before it returns to the first state again (for example, when the grand prize opening is completely closed). (e.g., the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over winnings are completed within the period from when the winnings are completed until the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R is reached),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 045AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). ),
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means is configured such that when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state. Control is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquisition amount display is not being performed, the control shown in FIG. 10- As shown in 10 (c-18), although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2. (e.g., lighting them alternately and emitting more light from the production effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, a right-handed display is displayed);
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific light emitting means is made to emit light and the predetermined light emitting means is made to correspond to the operation promotion display. The specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game when the award amount display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the big prize opening is After the release, until a predetermined period has elapsed, the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit, After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, as shown in FIGS. When the production effect lamps 9 are lit alternately and the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, the 10-9 (c-15), do not turn off the light, leave it on as is),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened) (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened) (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award amount display after the predetermined period is not displayed. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and the production effect is started only after the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). (such as making the lamp 9 emit light),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect). ), and at the same time as the display of the awarded amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, and displaying the jackpot effect after a predetermined period of time)
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the mid-round performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance (e.g., to make the production effect lamp 9 emit light),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
further comprising a general prize winning means (for example, general prize winning hole 10, etc.) through which game media can be won;
The display means is
The amount of gaming value awarded as a result of a game medium winning in the general winning means can be displayed as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning hole 10, a number of winnings display may be displayed). ),
If the game medium does not win in the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after the predetermined period has elapsed, If a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded),
If the game medium enters the general winning means within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, the grand prize opening is in an open state). If a game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period after , "0003" will be displayed as the number of wins after the predetermined period has passed, corresponding to the winning in the general winning hole 10. ),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side),
The display means is
A first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) can be displayed at the same timing as the award amount display,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the award amount display during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot),
The effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot is moved toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and is displayed in a manner that suggests a right-handed hit. Such),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displaying the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displaying "0015" instead of displaying "0000");
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the above);
Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display processing in step S172),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part production pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the specific vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific vibration performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is configured to perform vibration between the predetermined vibration performance and the specific vibration performance. Examples include gaming machines with different modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (if no prize is won within the predetermined period) or a specific display (if the prize is not won within the predetermined period) is displayed as the award amount display. ) is displayed, the amount to be given is suitably displayed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest, and the display is performed in a light emitting manner and at the execution timing of the vibration effect, which has a high rate of controlling the predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the specific vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect using the operating means. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, easily attracts players' interest and improves the interest of the performance.

Further, the operating means may vibrate when the variable winning means receives more than a specified number of winnings (11 or more winnings in a count of 10). By doing so, it is possible to clearly notify the player that an over-win has occurred, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Further, a light emitting effect may be executed in conjunction with the opening operation of the variable winning means. In this case, it is preferable that the light emission effect be performed in a manner that emphasizes that the variable prize winning means is in the first state. By doing so, you can create a suitable performance and improve the interest.

Furthermore, another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest is a gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. An operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, a vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. vibration performance execution means (for example, the operation unit performance control determined in step AKS203 A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the pattern and the variable display performance control pattern), and a light emission performance that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance (for example, an operation Light emitting effect execution means that can execute (e.g., light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting color included in the part effect pattern) (for example, a step using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance processing in S172, etc.) and a specific performance that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. an execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), Also, when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.), and the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect is higher. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the lighting mode of jackpot reliability, etc.), and the vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), An example is a gaming machine in which the vibration mode is different depending on the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this feature part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process enables determining the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the usage pattern. In addition, the production control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation and the advance notice production control pattern are not limited to those that set separate production control patterns, but one production control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each production. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect will be executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of a super reach where the variable display result is a "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of a reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number for determining a ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 11-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 11-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 11-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will continue to be made, as well as suggestions regarding the set values.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, etc. It may be possible to change the presentation mode by any presentation device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

FIG. 11-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-reach effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change effect (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Furthermore, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, which from the perspective of the gaming parlor indicates that the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 11-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is in a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 11-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD102 in which the reach performance of normal reach becomes a reach development that transitions to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 11-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Further, by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 11-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 11-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 11-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 11-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect includes arbitrary effects such as a pseudo continuous effect and a look-ahead preview effect to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation, as well as setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding the setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include cases where suggestions are made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify and improve gaming interest.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic part 10SH)
Next, the characteristic part 10SH of this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes an operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a line-of-sight guide effect execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to control the production control CPU 120 at any one of timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols starts, timing T2 when reach is established, and normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at either timing T3 when the reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the production control CPU 120 may press the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is between timing T1 and timing T2, or between timing T3 and timing T4. It is possible to perform a vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and the luminous color are the same.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance performance at the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the gaze guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance while a line-of-sight guidance performance is being performed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that is different from the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance when a super reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various performance images.

The display of the line-of-sight guiding effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image for the eye-guiding performance has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light by lighting the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to provide various vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs are built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 12-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, and produces game effects in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on/off lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 12-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the random numbers for effect that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random number for effect updating process is used.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing a vibration performance that is not linked to a preview performance. In the process of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration performance is to be executed and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance, using random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referenced in the lottery in step 10 SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is determined according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determined value to be compared with the random number value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect so that the vibration effects are different.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain performance A is, for example, (probability that performance A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result will be a "jackpot")/{(display result Probability that effect A will be executed when is a “jackpot”) × (probability that the display result will be a “jackpot”) + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a “jackpot”) x ( Probability that the displayed result will not be a "jackpot")]

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery in step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is set so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value when the display result becomes "jackpot". It is sufficient that the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration performance of each execution pattern is executed when the display result is not a "big hit" are stipulated.

(Contents of vibration performance and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses execution patterns SE1 to SE1 to Multiple types of vibration effects of SE10 can be performed.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it does not perform the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as vibration effects at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration performance at timing T2 when the reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to perform timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, and timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. The vibration effect can be performed at any of the timings. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed, it does not perform the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect. Further, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration performance at timing T4 while the super reach performance is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be performed while the super reach effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to control whether the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing T1, the normal reach reach performance is being executed at timing T3, or the super reach reach performance is being executed. Regardless of whether it is the timing T4 of It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light emits red light. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light. It is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light. It is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow color light regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. It is possible to perform vibration effects. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is a "jackpot". will be notified definitively.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to draw attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is pushed. When a vibration effect in which the button 31B emits red light is executed, the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started than when executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. Highly reliable jackpot. In addition, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed than when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. , high jackpot reliability.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the super reach effect will be used instead of the normal reach effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. It is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T4 during execution. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of normal reach is being executed, expectations are further increased for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. be able to.

Note that the jackpot reliability of the vibrating performance that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach performance. In addition, if it is possible to execute multiple types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach reach effect is being executed is , it is sufficient that the reliability is higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibrating effect that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach effect is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach effect. In addition, if it is possible to perform multiple types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the vibration effect jackpot that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the super reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of super reach reach performance.

According to such a configuration, a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being performed, or a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being performed, can be used as a chance-up performance. can do.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when reach is established, a vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. This will definitely notify you that the displayed result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibrating effect is not executed at the timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started, expectations for the vibrating effect to be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved can be further increased.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols progresses, expectations for the execution of the vibration effect can be changed in a complex manner.

In addition, the probability that a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light is sufficiently low compared to the probability that other types of vibration effects will be executed. By specifying this, it is possible to increase the interest when it is definitely announced that the display result will be a "jackpot".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chances of making the user recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12-3, after that, according to the determination result in step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed and the super reach reach performance in the current variable display. It is determined whether the vibration effect is to be executed at any one of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, if the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the visual line guiding effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guide performance is a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance based on random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance performance at the same rate regardless of the mode of the current vibration performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to perform eye-direction effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, when performing the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance performance is not performed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, after the display result of "missing" is displayed, a relief effect may be executed and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display has been derived and displayed and the current variable display has started, if the eye guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, There is a possibility that the previous variable display may give the misunderstanding that a relief effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the line-of-sight guiding effect is not performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, so it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

Furthermore, if the line-of-sight guide performance is executed at timing T2 when a reach is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become a predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guide effect is not performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become a predetermined reach mode. .

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of Step 10SHS3; No) or Step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute other performances such as a ready-to-reach performance, the mode of the performance to be executed, etc. (Step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various performances such as a preview performance will be performed and their mode are determined by lottery. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not a preview performance is performed and its mode by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the current display result, the current variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect specified by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 sets a timer value according to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the production control process timer, and also sets the type and mode of the production decided to be executed. The effect specifying data specifying the effect and the execution timing specifying timer value indicating the execution timing of the effect by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in a timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of performances determined to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores performance specifying data and an execution timing specifying timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and from which the determined final stop symbol is derived (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of decorative symbols. Note that at this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration effects and line-of-sight guidance effects)
FIG. 12-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing and performance period of the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when a reach is established. In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

If the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the eye-gaze guidance performance before executing the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the sight-line guidance performance 4 seconds before timing T3. , the vibration effect is started at timing T3. Similarly, in the case where the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of Super Reach, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect of the present embodiment performs line-of-sight guidance 4 seconds before timing T4. The effect is started, and when the timing T4 comes, the vibration effect is started. The production period of the gaze guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7 are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of vibration performance and line-of-sight guidance performance. In this performance operation example, an example will be described in which a vibration performance is executed at timing T4 while a super reach performance is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute multiple types of super reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as a background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the super reach effect is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced size of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach effect was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. , and a "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established, are displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing a small pattern that becomes a notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing a confirmed small pattern that becomes a display result is displayed. derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns different from decorative patterns are variably displayed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the final decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small patterns is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small symbols disappear from the screen or are obstructed by obstacles. It will not be blocked by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK are also referred to as permanent small symbols or presentation small symbols. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of identifiable patterns are displayed in a display mode that is partially or completely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that shows numbers in the same way as a part that shows numbers in a decorative pattern. A performance image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a notification information image. Note that the small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is hidden. For example, after a variable display of a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, instead of a variable display of a decorative pattern, a variable display of a small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-6(A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of the .

Note that a fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is, for example, repeated display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth symbol display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are connected to the display screen of the image display device 5 on the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1. is located at a remote location. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether variable display is in progress or not. Whether or not a display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, in this example, there is a pending display area 10SHH for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , is displayed. Note that when the super reach effect is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

Furthermore, a pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the pending number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the pending display area 10SHH, the pending number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in a specifiable manner. The display mode is that of arithmetic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guide effect four seconds before the timing T4 during which the super reach effect is being executed. The performance control CPU 120 executes a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using, for example, a visual performance effect as a gaze guidance performance.

In this example, the production control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B). do.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character makes an action of raising a hammer, as shown in FIGS. 12-6(B) to 12-6(D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. 12-7(E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 controls the button image 10SHB when the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB, and a plurality of star-like shapes are created from the button image 10SHB at timing T4. The appearance of various images is changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS of "Star" is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 starts the vibration performance at timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and causes the push button 31B to vibrate. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the eye-guide effect, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (H). After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the vibration performance and stops the vibration of the push button 31B when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance has elapsed, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 12-1, for example. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and to check whether the push button 31B is vibrating or not or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the On the other hand, by performing a line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set lower than that of the constant small symbol and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the small symbol always displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a lower priority than the regular small symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the pending number display displayed in the pending number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer that is in front of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figures 12-6(B) to 12-7(G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the "mountain scenery" background image 10SHY. It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery".

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-reach decorative pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-6(D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the eye-guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the pending display.

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, creating a visual guidance effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance can be made conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbols and the pending number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 12-6 (B) to 12-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guiding effect is being executed, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect and the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect are Also, small symbols and pending number displays, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, it is possible to better ensure the visibility of the small design and the pending number display at all times, and to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance more noticeable. .

(Modified example of characteristic part 10SH)
The invention related to the characteristic part 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 12-3, the determination ratio of whether or not to use the eye-guide effect may be set depending on which type of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration performance is a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. Depending on whether it is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits a red light, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color. The presence or absence of eye-guiding effects may be determined at different ratios. Here, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light, it is easy to execute the gaze guiding effect. In addition, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors, the eye guidance effect is always performed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance performance is executed, the execution rate of the vibration performance with higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance. In this case, there are multiple types of vibration performances that are linked to the preview performance, depending on the combination of the linked preview performance, the vibration duration of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the emitting color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 can execute an accessory preview effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance that is linked to a highly reliable accessory preview performance. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked accessory preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the accessory preview performance.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked with other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview effect, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after a determined decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination is derived, the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole. By doing so, a jackpot game state may be started. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration performance that is linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It may be definitely notified that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state is the highest number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the production control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance performance. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect only needs to have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed when displaying the error notification image.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It can improve your interest when playing. Further, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is made longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. , it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to a certain timing as a reference, and may be made different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before timing T2, based on timing T2 when reach is achieved. , timing T3 when normal reach reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when super reach reach effect is being executed, which is a timing later than timing T2, is 3 seconds. The vibration time at a timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at a timing before the reference timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be different. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated at a first strength and times when it is vibrated at a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated at the second strength. When vibrating the push button 31B at the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated at the first strength. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability may be the same between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution patterns of the vibration performances and jackpot reliability that are respectively executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration performance may be executed as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities to perform vibration effects.

In addition to this, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-reading notice performance is different when the vibration mode is the first mode and when it is the second mode. , the jackpot reliability may be different in the variable display before execution that is the target of the pre-read notice. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-read preview production is such that it vibrates continuously for a predetermined period of time, and when the vibration mode is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, To make jackpot reliability different in a variable display before execution that is a target of a look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance.

Alternatively, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance, the execution timing of the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance may be set to multiple times that can execute the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only one of the timings. For example, the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance can be performed only at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a pre-read notice can be executed, the vibration effect is executed as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the execution has been carried out.

When performing a vibration performance as a preview performance at a timing when a vibration performance is possible as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance. For example, if it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a preview effect at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview preview performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which it continues to vibrate for a predetermined period of time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance The mode of vibration is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off over a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the case where the vibration performance as a preview performance can be executed at the timing when the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, either It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model of pachinko game machine 1 and the second model of pachinko game machine 1 which is different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration effect, even if the mode of the vibration effect executed on the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed on the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, the jackpot cannot be won. The reliability may be the same. For example, regarding the vibration performance executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific performance executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect to be performed at that time, for example, if the eye-guide effect is not performed. For example, when executing a notification effect to notify that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is used to vibrate the push button 31B during a period in which the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guide performance is not performed, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the performance being executed at that time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first model have the same execution pattern and jackpot reliability, vibrations of the same execution pattern can be used. Regarding the production, only the lower limit value of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when a vibration performance is executed as a performance to increase the chance of another performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance can be flexibly determined in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other performance. While making adjustments, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be able to be performed at a timing different from timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, the production control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination, and then temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination. It is possible to perform an inciting performance that incites development into a reach mode. After the promotion effect is executed, there are cases in which the reach mode is developed with high reliability of jackpot, and cases where the display result becomes "miss" without developing into the reach mode with high reliability of jackpot. When developing into a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 executes a successful promotion performance that notifies the development to a ready-to-reach mode with high jackpot reliability as a result of the promotion performance. On the other hand, if the display result is "miss" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will not develop as a result of the promotion performance. Execute the inciting failure performance. In executing such an inciting effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the inciting success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful inciting performance is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful stimulation performance may be adjusted to match the image of the successful stimulation performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the inciting success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminescent color as the luminescent color. According to such a configuration, when a successful inciting performance is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be a "miss" even if the reach mode develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. It is possible to prevent it from increasing.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative symbol that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the interest at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to increase expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to make it possible to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. It can improve your interest when playing.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the advantage to the player is Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different numbers, the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration production can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid giving the misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage. It can be done.

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the jackpot type, an execution pattern in which the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance is "rainbow color" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration performance, it is possible to prevent a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that has a low advantage to the player, It is possible to prevent expectations for the vibration performance from being impaired.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using an auditory performance effect as a gaze guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when a vibration production is being performed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a low volume to a high volume as a line-of-sight guidance production. Output as it changes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of a player who has difficulty recognizing the line-of-sight guiding performance using visual performance effects to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

If the configuration is such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, even if the vibration performance has the same execution pattern, the first setting value and the second setting value different from the first setting value may be used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different depending on the time. For example, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to increase expectations that the set value is highly advantageous.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be changed depending on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emitted light color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the setting value is any one of "1" to "3", and when the setting value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect is It is sufficient if the vibration time and emitted light color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the high setting is likely to be the setting value "6" which is most advantageous for the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the set value is an even number, which may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to draw attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the manner in which the vibration effect is executed.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. If it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when reach is established. There may be cases where In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at timing T1 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T2 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, it is possible not only to increase expectations for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T2 when reach is established, but also to further increase attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at timing T3 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 while the normal reach effect is being executed, the vibration effect causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible to not only increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed, but also to draw more attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T4. can be increased.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those shown in FIG. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot", the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous, but it definitely reports that the display result is a "jackpot". In the vibration effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vibration performance that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be always executed. According to such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means is suitably recognized, thereby suitably increasing the expectation that the displayed result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of the reach effect. be able to.

When performing a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, a timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed; The vibration effect may be made possible to be performed at any one of the timing T4 and the time when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is set so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at timing T4; limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When it is possible to perform a vibration performance that is linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance may be different from the mode of the vibration performance that is not linked to the preview performance. For example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to the accessory preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the accessory moves. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from that of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. According to such a configuration, when a vibration performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to a preview performance or not linked to a preview performance. .

It may also be possible to perform a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer as shown in FIG. 12-6(B) may jump out of the opened present box, and a line-of-sight guiding effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, since the present box effect is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the line-of-sight guidance effect and the vibration effect.

When it is possible to execute an operation effect that causes the push button 31B to be operated, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the manner in which the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect. For example, when lighting the push button 31B for a vibration effect, the control may be such that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for 3 seconds while the push button 31B vibrates, resulting in a lighting mode for the vibration effect. . On the other hand, in order to light up the push button 31B in the operation performance, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting up) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds during the operation validity period. It may be controlled to have a lighting mode for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Note that during the valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to notify that the operation of the operation lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light when the lever operation is valid. The lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation.

For example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like can be operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of music and background to be output, and display images. Settings related to effects, such as the brightness settings of the device 5 and the brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which production setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed depending on the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. You can do it like this. Further, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the settings related to the performance can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the settings regarding the performance can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, (See Publication No. 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while viewing a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if a vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the interest through vibration effects.

Therefore, in order to attract attention to the gaming means before the vibration performance is executed and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature section 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). includes a push button 31B that can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.), and a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the performance control CPU 120 includes a push button 31B (e.g., the CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a vibrating effect in which the player vibrates), a line-of-sight guiding effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.), and the vibration effect execution means is , the vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started). , timing T2 when reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when normal reach reach effect is being executed, and timing when super reach reach effect is being executed. T4, etc.), the vibration effect can be performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform the following regardless of whether it is at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any one of timing T3 and timing T4). (first, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emitted light color are the same); For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the gaze-guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2, etc.). , the performance control CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operating means before the vibration performance is executed, and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance.

In the gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature section 10SH, in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line of sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control The CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect while the line-of-sight guide effect is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 1 or 2, the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature part 10SH has a specific performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 , a super reach reach effect, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it is possible to perform a vibration effect while a super reach effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images). ), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (e.g., the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information). may have a lower priority than a small symbol, a pending number display, various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, a decorative symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, it is possible to suitably ensure the visibility of the predetermined information while making the visibility of the line-of-sight guide effect noticeable.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which the vibration performance execution means executes the vibration performance of the first aspect and the advantageous state than the first aspect. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 1.5 seconds and It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits white light, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit red light. When a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light than when a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, the vibration effect of the second aspect is more likely to be performed in a pachinko game). In machine 1, when the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted white light. At the same time, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is easier to perform, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect of the second aspect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 13-1 shows an example of the configuration of the effect device regarding the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by, for example, power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestion performance suggesting that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect.

FIG. 13-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section performance pattern used to execute the operation section performance. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and purpose are set corresponding to each operating part performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that a super reach performance will be executed after a normal reach performance is executed (development of reach). The win/fail notification inciting time corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 13-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is performed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 13-2(B) shows an example of settings when executing a specific linked effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery performance that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control and the termination conditions after the end of the jackpot gaming state, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery performance regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V winning hole in the V winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state, whether or not the V winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it becomes possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is controlled by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning prize occurs, the controller is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be brought to a gaming stop state under the control of the CPU 103 in the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 13-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 13-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation section effects. FIG. 13-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same between the operation part effect executed when a reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach is developed. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance using a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is controlled more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. As a result, the light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect than the light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode continues for a period of time. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV44, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 13-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white manner. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 70% or more for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When executing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section performance pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the emitted light colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), and luminous brightness can also be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The pre-read preview performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 13-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern, refer to the continuous performance pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories, and depending on the winning determination result, a determined value that matches the random value is assigned. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 13-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed.

FIG. 13-5(B) shows continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 13-5(C) shows continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 13-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-read notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables execution of the pre-read notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read notice setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read notice setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a loss-type super reach confirmed, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance, which is a pre-read preview performance, based on the winning determination result, which is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 13-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance preview setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation part effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display where the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance is lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . Further, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) in response to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 13-8 shows a configuration example of the production control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 13-8(A) executes various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command. Contains control data used to control the The operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control contents of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display performance process in step S172 of the performance control process process, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It constitutes production control execution data #1 to production control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of production control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect. The vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 13-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and are timings at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation section performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 13-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the target change is started, and is the timing at which the operation section performance at the start of the target change can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, during some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the operation section according to the operation section performance pattern according to the remaining number of times. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

The timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 13-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when a reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when a win/fail notification is triggered. Each timing is feasible. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is established. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Can be done. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time for inciting the success/failure notification.

FIG. 13-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 13-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 13-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuations. As shown in FIG. 13-10(B), the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 13-10(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light becomes white in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 300 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 13-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 13-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuations. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 13-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 13-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, red-purple, blue-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light-emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, for example, the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emission time, color, and light emission can be specified according to each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 13-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 13-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 13-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 13-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 13-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 13-13 shows an example of control of the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 13-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 13-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 13-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 13-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds, as shown in FIG. 13-13(B). As shown in Figure 13-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern is AKC12. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIGS. 13-14 show an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 13-14 (A). This includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIGS. 13-14(C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIGS. 13-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIGS. 13-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIGS. 13-15 show an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. 13-15 (A), This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 13-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other effect as long as it is accompanied by reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 13-15 (C), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 13-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the performance at the time of reach development, and the light emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. As for the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include those that execute a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31, such as the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance There are cases in which the vibration modes of the two are different. Furthermore, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is triggered have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color changes to white, red, or rainbow colors due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is performed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. For example, the reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to SP Reach A's reach effect in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration effect by the operation part effect is executed than if the specific effect is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIGS. 13-16 show an example of the execution of effects by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is white. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section performance according to any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration performance.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section performance according to any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in such an operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect according to a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, the light emission can be made different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 13-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ02 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A become rainbow colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the game's interest can be improved. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may also be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between an operation section presentation and a specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 13-18 to 13-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 13-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 13-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 13-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach production.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 13-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. The light may be emitted in a light emitting pattern in which the emitted light color and emitted light brightness gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked effects that are executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, and Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be executed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of the effect images such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N will emit light in gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to perform the entire music playback in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In conjunction with the output of the sound that plays back music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance with a vibration pattern AKV43, a change in the light emitting color from blue to red, and It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 13-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21(A), during the period AKZ03 during which the specific interlocking effect can be executed with music playback, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sound corresponding to the musical scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 13-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 13-21 (C). It includes a vibration performance, which is a vibration performance, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 13-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 13-21(B), the specific light emitting effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed on the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and need only be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the ``R'' scale, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performance and improve the interest in the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display effect control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 13-8(A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking effect, it is possible to execute a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation section performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 13-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 13-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B, thereby improving the game's interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with a special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance differ in light emitting modes such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation part performance and the specific linked performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game enjoyment can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in Figures 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is common when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the effects using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 13-5(A) is the operation section performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and the operation section performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming inferior. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 13-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-10 and 13-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 13-12 and 13-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times the player is opened, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a certain It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary presentation state, an operation part presentation or a specific interlocking presentation may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation part production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Moreover, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, there will be no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random values are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the setting, so this is only possible if the setting values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, if the small winning is won and the time saving state is entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is set when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a specified number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect depending on the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance upon notification of being controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different, for example, as long as it is the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is different from the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in one light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the eye guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guiding effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. The case where the line-of-sight guiding effect can be executed at the second timing may be, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration performance can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 11... Main board 12... Production control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, displaying an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of gaming value is performed at the start of the award amount display, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. It is possible to display
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration performance based on the start of the variable display,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images